Professional Documents
Culture Documents
گرامر برای مکالمه زبان انگلیسی
گرامر برای مکالمه زبان انگلیسی
گرامر برای مکالمه زبان انگلیسی
اﻧﮕﻠﯿﺴﯽ
1
www.ParsBook.org
ﺯﻜﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻡ ﻨﺸﺭﻩ
ﺃﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻣﻨﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻡ
2
www.ParsBook.org
ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ:
• ﻓﺎﻋﻞ
• ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ
• ﻓﻌﻞ
• ﻗﻴﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ
• ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ
• ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ
• ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ
• ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ
• ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ
• ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ )ﻣﻌﻴﻦ(
• ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒThe
• ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ
• ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ mustﻭ have to
23 .5ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ )ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ(
26 .6ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻣﻲ
30 .7ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ
3
www.ParsBook.org
54 .17ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﺖ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ :
4
www.ParsBook.org
141 .51ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺣﺪﺳﻲ ﻭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ
145 .52ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ
146 Conditionals .53ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ
149 » Otherwise .54ﻭﺍﻻ«
150 ﻛﺎﺷﻜﻲ ـ ﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺵ « Wish » .55
151 .56ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝif
151 .57ﻭﻗﺘﺶ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ» « It is time
152 IF .58ﺣﺬﻑ
153 Unless .59
154 Would rather .60
156 as if – as though .61
157 » « in Case ) .62ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺍ ﻧﻜﻨﻪ(
158 Both .63
159 .64ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ active & passive voice :
• ﺻﻔﺖ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ
• ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ
• ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ
• ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ
• ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ
• ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ
• ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ
• ﺟﺎﻱ ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ :
• ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ.
• ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺣﺴﻲ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ.
• ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻣﺮ
170 .65ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﺒﺒﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺳﺒﺒﻲ :
171 .66ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﺒﺒﻲ
172 .67ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ reported speach
173 .68ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ Indirect speech
• ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﺒﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ .
• ﻓﻌﻞ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﺧﺒـﺮﻱ
• ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ
• ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ:
• ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ.
• ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ :
5
www.ParsBook.org
• ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ :
• ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﻌﺠﺒﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ :
181 .69ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ) ( gerund
184 .70ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ to
6
www.ParsBook.org
7
www.ParsBook.org
ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ ﻣﺆﻟﻒ :
ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺗﮑﻨﻮﻟﻮﮊﯼ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﯼ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﻭ
ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﮑﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺍﻥ ،ﺩﺍﻧﺸﺠﻮﻳﺎﻥ ﻭ
ﻣﺤﻘﻘﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ،ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺍﻣﺮﯼ ﺑﺪﻳﻬﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺘﻨﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺣﺘﯽ
ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ،ﻫﺮ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ .ﺑﻪ ﻗﻮﻝ
ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ ،ﺁﺏ ﺩﺭﻳﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﮐﺸﻴﺪ ،ﻫﻢ ﺑﻘـﺪﺭ ﺗﺸﻨﮕﯽ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭼﺸﻴﺪ.
ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﮔﺎﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ،ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ .ﺧﻮﺷﺒﺨﺘﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﻬﺎﯼ ﺑﻴﺸﻤﺎﺭﯼ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﻭ
ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺸﻮﺭﻣﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﺷﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺫﮐﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ
ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﯽ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺒﺘﺪﯼ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩﯼ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺒﻼ
ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﯽ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﮔﺮﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺟﻬﺖ
ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ .ﻭﺟﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﺰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺟﺰﻭﺍﺕ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ
ﻧﺤﻮﯼ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎ ،ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺒﺘﺪﯼ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﻮﻳﺘﺮ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﭼﺸﻤﮕﻴﺮﯼ
ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ.
ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﮐﻪ ،ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﮐﻪ
ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﮑﻠﯽ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﯼ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺎ
ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ .ﻟﺬﺍ ﺩﺭﻭﺳﯽ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻗﻴﺪ ،ﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭﯼ ﺑﻠﮑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﻧﺪﯼ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ
ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ.
ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﯼ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﺮﺍﻥ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﻟﻴﺎﻥ
ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﯼ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻮﻟﻒ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻼﺣﺎﺗﯽ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺫﮐﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ،
ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭﺍﺗﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ
ﭼﺸﻢ ﺑﺨﻮﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻮﻟﻒ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻧﻈﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﺭﺯﺷﻤﻨﺪﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻭﯼ
ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﻴﺪ.
ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺪﺭ ﻋﺰﻳﺰﻡ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻼﺵ ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻬﺎﺩﻥ ﺳﻨﮓ ﺑﻨﺎﯼ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﺁﻭﺭﯼ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ
ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﻭ ﻣﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﺰﻳﺰﻡ ﺑﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻧﮕﻴﺰﻩ ﻭ ﺷﻮﻕ ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﺸﮑﺮ ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻢ.
ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺴﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻧﻘﺪﺭﻡ ﮐﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺻﺮﻑ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ
ﻭ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻬﻤﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﮐﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﮑﺮ ﻭ ﻗﺪﺭﺩﺍﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻢ.
ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﮔﺮﺍﻧﻘﺪﺭﻡ ﺁﻗﺎﯼ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻧﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻨﺎﺋﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﯼ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺲ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺮ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺩ ،ﻣﻮﻟﻒ
ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﯽ ﻋﻤﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻣﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺯﺣﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﺷﺪ .ﺑﺪﻭﻥ
ﺍﻏﺮﺍﻕ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﻭﻃﻠﺒﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻭﯼ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻣﻘﺪﻭﺭ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ.
ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺩ ﺍﺭﺟﻤﻨﺪﻡ ﺟﻨﺎﺏ ﺁﻗﺎﯼ ﺭﺿﺎ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺎﺗﻴﺪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎﯼ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ
ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﻋﺸﻖ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ
ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺗﺸﮑﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ.
8
www.ParsBook.org
ﺩﺭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻤﺎﻝ ﺧﺮﺳﻨﺪﯼ:
ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﮎ ﻫﺪﻳﻪ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﯽ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ :
ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺘﻲ ﺭﺍﻳﮕﺎﻥ ،ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﻣﻨﺪﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮ ﻭ ﮐﻤﮏ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ
ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻌﺖ ﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻧﻤﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ .ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ
ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺍﺻﻞ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻴﻨﮏ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘﻴﺪ.
ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘﻴﺪ .ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻭ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﻌﺪﯼ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺘﻲ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ.
http://www-ce.uta.edu/~enayatpour/hmpg/mynotes.htm
9
www.ParsBook.org
ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭼﻪ ﮐﺴﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ؟
ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ،ﺩﺑﻴﺮﺳﺘﺎﻥ ،ﺩﺍﻭﻃﻠﺒﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﮑﻮﺭ ﺳﺮﺍﺳﺮﯼ ،ﺩﺍﻭﻃﻠﺒﻴﻨﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ,MCHE ،TOEFL
,IELTSﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ،ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩﯼ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺼﺪ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ
10
www.ParsBook.org
ﻣﻌﺮﻓﯽ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ:
ﺳﺮﺍﺳﺮﯼ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻧﻤﻴﺸﻮﺩ .ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﻭﻃﻠﺒﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﮑﻮﺭ ﺳﺮﺍﺳﺮﯼ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ
ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ. ﻧﻤﻴﺸﻮﺩ .ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ.
11
www.ParsBook.org
ﺑﻨﺎﻡ ﺧﺪﺍ
ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ :ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ
ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ :ﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ،ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺁﻣﺪ ،ﻛﻪ
ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺟﻤﻊ
→ he ﺍﻭ
ﺁﻧﻬﺎ → they
ﺍﻭ → she
ﺁﻥ → it
ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻓﻌﻞ :ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ )ﻥ( ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﻌـﻞ ﺑـﻪ ﮐـﺎﺭ
ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ .ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﺎ )ﻥ( ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ ,ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ toﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ.
You see
They see
12
www.ParsBook.org
ﻗﻴﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ :ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ.
ﺁﻧﺠﺎ there ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ hereﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺭﺳﻪ at school ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ in the class ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ at home
ﺍﻣــﺮﻭﺯ today ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ every day ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ yesterday ﻳﻚ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ every other day
ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻭﺝ on even days ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﺩ on odd days
ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ :ﺻﻔﺎﺗﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣـﻲ ﺭﺳـﺎﻧﻨﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑـﺎﻥ
ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ.
3ـ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺘﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺠﺰ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﯼ thisﻭ thatﮐﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ،ﺟﻤـﻊ ﻳـﺎ ﻣﻔـﺮﺩ
ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ:
ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ :ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ.
13
www.ParsBook.org
ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ:
ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺟﻤﻊ
ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺟﻤﻊ
ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ )ﻣﻌﻴﻦ( :ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳـﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ toﻧﻤـﻲ ﺁﻳـﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﺟـﺰ ﺩﺭ
ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻦ can ﺑﺎﻳﺪ must ﺑﺎﻳﺪ should ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ may
14
www.ParsBook.org
ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ:
-2ﺑﺎ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﺪﻥ ،ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜـﻲ ﺑـﺎ ﺭﻓـﺘﻦ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ،ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﺭﺍ
ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ )ﺁﻳﺎ ـ ﻣﮕﺮ ـ ﻟﺤﻦ ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ
ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻝ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤـﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ
ﺍﻭﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ doﻭ doesﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ.
I am → are ﺗﺬﮐﺮ :ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ Iﻭ weﺑﻪ youﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ you ? :
-3ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ )ﻥ( ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻨﻔـﻲ
ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻲ (not) ،ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ.
15
www.ParsBook.org
am not → am not
ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﻭﻡ :ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ notﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ notﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺳﺮ ﺟﺎﻳﺶ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ
ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ.
ﺁﻳﺎ
?You can’t go → can’t you go
?You can not go → can you not go ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﻭﻱ؟ ﻣﮕﺮ
ﻟﺤﻦ
16
www.ParsBook.org
Used to ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ
:The
ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ " ﻣﻦ ﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺭﻡ" ،ﺳﻴﺐ ﻧﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﯽ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ " ﻣﻦ ﺳﻴﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺭﻡ"،
ﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ . .ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﻮﻡ " ﻣﻦ ﺳﻴﺐ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺭﻡ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻴﺒﻲ ﺭﺍ
ﮐﻪ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺭﻡ" ،ﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺗﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻲ ،ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺩﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﻳﻲ :ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻧـﺎﮔﻮﻥ
ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺮﻑ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ،ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ
am-is-areﺑﻪ beﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺩﻭﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ to haveﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺟﺎﻫـﺎ ﺑـﻪ ﺷـﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ
ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺎﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ.
17
www.ParsBook.org
I have → I can have I am → I must be
you have → you can have You are → You can be
They have → They can have He is → he must be
We have → we can have
She has → she can have
Have Am
to have Is Be
Has are
18
www.ParsBook.org
: ﭘﺎﺳﺦ
ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻬﻢ
( ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﻭto) ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ-1
used : ﻭ )ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎought to ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺠﺰ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞto ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ-2
have ﻭhas ﻳﻌﻨﻲTo have ( ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭam-is-are) ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲTo be ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ.(to
19
www.ParsBook.org
try ﺳﻌﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ be going to ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ
ﺗﺬﮐﺮ :ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ has , haveﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ.
have
داﺷﺘﻦ و ﺧﻮردن → اﺳﻢ +
has
ﺗﺬﮐﺮ :ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ (to) has , haveﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ.
have
ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ → + to
has
20
www.ParsBook.org
:ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ
: ﭘﺎﺳﺦ
21
www.ParsBook.org
: ﭘﺎﺳﺦ
9. We ought to be polite.
→ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲOught you to be polite? Are you ought to polite?
→ ﻣﻨﻔﻲYou ought not to be polite. You aren’t ought to polite.
→ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲOught you not to be polite? aren't you ought to polite?
22
www.ParsBook.org
Simple Present Tense ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ )ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ(
ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ :ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ :ﺍﮔﺮ toﻱ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ
ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺩﺭ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ) (it-she-heﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ) (ies-es-sﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ .
ﺗﺬﻛﺮ :ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ z,o,x,ch,sh,sﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ esﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ:
Washes/buzzes/watches/fixes/misses/mixes
-3ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ yﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ yﺣﺮﻑ ﺻﺪﺍﺩﺍﺭ ” “a,e,I,o,uﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻓﻘﻂ s
ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ.
ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ yﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ yﺣﺮﻑ ﺻﺪﺍﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ yﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ
Carry Æ carries
StudyÆ studies
23
www.ParsBook.org
-4ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺜﻞ :
The sun sets in the west. ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻏﺮﺏ ،ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ .
ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ :ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ does ,doﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻬﻢ s ) does :ﭘﺮﺍﻥ es -ﭘﺮﺍﻥ ies -ﭘﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ doesn’tﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻃﻮﺭ(
24
www.ParsBook.org
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ :
ﭘﺎﺳﺦ:
25
www.ParsBook.org
Question Words. ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻣﻲ.
whoﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ -1ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ:
whomﻛﻲ ﺭﺍ ،ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺭﺍ -2ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ :
whatﭼﻪ ﭼﻴﺰ -3ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ:
whereﻛﺠﺎ -4ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ:
whenﭼﻪ ﻭﻗﺖ -ﻛﻲ -5ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ
how manyﭼﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ -6ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ
how muchﭼﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ -7ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ
howﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ -8ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ
-9ﺍﮔﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ what timeﭼﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ
how longﭼﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ -10ﺍﮔﺮﻣﺪﺕ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ
how oftenﭼﻨﺪ ﺩﻓﻌﻪ -11ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ
اﺳﻢ whose +ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ -12ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ
-14ﺍﮔﺮ + theﺻﻔﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ that ,this ,those ,these +ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ
whichﻛﺪﺍﻡ.
whyﭼﺮﺍ -15ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ
how oldﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻟﻪ -16ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ
how farﭼﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺘﻲ -17ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ
how tallﭼﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺍﻱ -18ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ
how fastﭼﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻲ -19ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ
what colorﭼﻪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ -20ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ
26
www.ParsBook.org
ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻪ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ (wh questions):
ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ -1ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ .ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺣﺘﻤﹰﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ :
Where
When
How
?do you work
Why +
What time
How often
How fast
Where do you go? Æ I know where you go ﻣﻦ ﻣﻴﺪﻭﻧﻢ ﻛﺠﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻱ
ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ -3ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺑﻨﺸﻴﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﻪ
27
www.ParsBook.org
?Which teacher works ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ؟
?What kind of student works ﭼﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ؟
1. I know where you play football every day at 2 o’clock.
2. I don’t know why the students don’t study at school.
3. I am sure why they are tired.
4. ?Do you know whose brother wants to speak English
5. I am not sure why they are lazy in class.
28
www.ParsBook.org
have to ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ
29
www.ParsBook.org
ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ
ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ :ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗـﺎ ﺁﻳﻨـﺪﻩ ﺑـﻪ ﻃـﻮﺭ
ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ :ﺍﮔﺮ ) ﺗﺎ +ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ) ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ +ﺍﺳﺖ ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ
ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ .ﻃﺒﻖ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ :
)(byﺗﺎ +ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ +ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ (For) +ﺍﺳﺖ +ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ Åﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ
ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ :ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ
ﻛﺮﺩ .
ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ + by +ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ Subject + will have been + verb + ing+ for +
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ 8ﺩﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ .
We will have been studying for two hours by eight o’clock.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :ﺗﺎ ﻣﺎﻩ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ 10ﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻬﺮﺍﻥ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ .
We will have been living in tehran for ten years by next month.
ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ :ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ Will
108
www.ParsBook.org
ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ
ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ :ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻭ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳـﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ
ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ :ﺍﮔﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ" ﺑﻮﺩ" ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ
ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ( For ) +ﺑﻮﺩ +ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ Åﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ
ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ :ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑـﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴـﻲ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣـﻮﻝ ﺯﻳـﺮ
ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ.
ﻓﺎﻋﻞ + before/when +ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ Subject + had been + verb + ing + for +
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:
I had been teaching for half an hour when you came.
-2ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺰﻧﻲ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﺁﺷﭙﺰﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ.
I had been doing the cooking for two hours before you called.
ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ :ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ hadﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ :ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ before, whenﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
109
www.ParsBook.org
talkative : ﭘﺮ ﺣﺮﻑ crowded : ﺷﻠﻮﻍ
110
www.ParsBook.org
adjective ﺻﻔﺖ
ﺻﻔﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻒ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ
ﻼ:
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ .ﻣﺜ ﹰ
ﻼ
ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ،ﻣﺜ ﹰ
ﻧﻜﺘﻪ :ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﺑﻄﻲ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ.
ﺻﻔﺖ + to be +ﺍﺳﻢ
ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ) ﺑﻮﺩﻥ – ﺷﺪﻥ – ﮔﺸﺘﻦ – ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻥ ( ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺟﻨﺒﺔ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺑـﻂ ﺩﺍﺭﻧـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ link
Today the weather got cold . ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺷﺪ.
ﺗﺬﮐﺮ :ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﺑﻄﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ) ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ. ( .
111
www.ParsBook.org
ﻼ:
ﺗﺬﮐﺮ :ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺑﻄﻲ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ
the soup tastes ( unusually ) unusual. ﺳﻮﭖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺪ.
ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺍﺷـﺎﺭﻩ this, thatﺑـﺎ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻔـﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺟﻤـﻊ
ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:
ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ :ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ .ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ :
-1ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ :ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ
ﻼ:
-2ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ) ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ( :ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺪﺗﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
112
www.ParsBook.org
ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ) ( thanﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﺗﺮ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷـﺎﻥ
erﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ
ﻼ:
-3ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ :ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ
ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ theﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻤـﻪ
ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ )ﺗﺮﻳﻦ( ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ estﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ
ﻼ:
ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ :ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﻳﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ yﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ erﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ estﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ .
ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ :ﭼﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ
113
www.ParsBook.org
ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ
much
many More than the most
114
www.ParsBook.org
The same as
: sameﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﻲ ﻭ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ theﺑـﻪ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﻣـﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻨـﻲ )
ﻼ:
ﻫﻤﺎﻥ – ﻳﻚ ( ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ
ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮﻱ :ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﺻﻔﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ) ( er , re , le , owﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ
ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ yﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ erﻭ estﻣـﻲ ﺩﻫـﺪ .ﺍﻣـﺎ ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ
ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ most , moreﻫـﻢ ﺗﻔﻀـﻴﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻋـﺎﻟﻲ
ﻛﺮﺩ.
-1ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ yﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ happyﻫﻨﮕـﺎﻡ ﺍﺿـﺎﻓﻪ ﺷـﺪﻥ er,estﺣـﺮﻑ y
115
www.ParsBook.org
-2ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ eﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺜﻞ wideﺩﺭ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ st , rﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣـﻲ
ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺻﺪﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺻﺪﺍﺩﺍﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ bigﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪﻫﺎﻱ erﻭ estﺣـﺮﻑ ﺑـﻲ ﺻـﺪﺍﻱ
) ﻣﺜﻞ – ﺷﺒﻴﻪ – ﻣﺎﻧﻨـﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ the sameﻛﻠﻤﻪ asﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ the same asﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ
116
www.ParsBook.org
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ the sameﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ asﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﻲ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﭼـﻮﻥ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ the
sameﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﮔﺰﻳﺮ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :
ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﻢ .
117
www.ParsBook.org
adverb ﻗﻴﺪ
ﻗﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ lyﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻴـﺪ ﻣـﻲ
ﻼ:
ﻛﻨﻨﺪ .ﻣﺜ ﹰ
ﺍﻳﻨﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ
ﻼ:
ﺍﺯ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﻣﺜ ﹰ
ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﻣﺜﻼً :
118
www.ParsBook.org
a nap ﭼﺮﺕ ﺯﺩﻥ
119
www.ParsBook.org
-5ﻣﻦ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﺮﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﻢ ﺑﻴﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻡ.
-7ﻓﻜﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﺟﺪﻱ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻜﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ .ﻃﺒﻌﹰﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻳـﺎ ﺑـﻪ
ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ lyﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ :
sisterly ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺮﺍﻧﻪ
120
www.ParsBook.org
ﺗﺬﮐﺮ :ﺍﮔﺮ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ lyﺍﺿـﺎﻓﻪ ﻛـﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻣـﺜ ﹰ
ﻼ
ﮔﻔﺖ friendlyLYﻧﺎﮔﺰﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
Fashion
………… In a/ an + Way ﺭﺍﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ
Manner
ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻗﻴﺪ :ﻗﻴﺪ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺡ :
-1ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ :ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ
ﻼ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﺪﻱ ﺳـﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﺗﺎﻳـﭗ ﻣـﻲ
ﻛﻨﺪ .
ﻼ:
-2ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ :ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺪﺗﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ
121
www.ParsBook.org
ﺑﻴﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﻄﻮﺭ
ﻧﻴﺴﺖ .ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ lyﻣﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ more thanﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ly
-3ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ ) ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ( :ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻬﺘـﺮﻳﻦ ﻳـﺎ ﺑـﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣـﻲ
ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ "ﺗﺮﻳﻦ" ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﺯﻗﻴﺪ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﻴﺪ lyﻣﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﻗﺒﻠﺶ the mostﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ly
122
www.ParsBook.org
ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ intensifiers : ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ
ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ much, manyﮐﻪ ﻫﺮﺩﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﯽ ﺯﻳـﺎﺩ – ﺧﻴﻠـﯽ
ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ.
ﻓﺮﻕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ muchﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ manyﺍﺳـﻢ
muchﻭ manyﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ
ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺍﺯ a lot ofﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﭼـﻪ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ ﺷـﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻭ ﭼـﻪ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻏﻴـﺮ ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ tooﻳﺎ veryﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ .
Too
ﺯﻳﺎﺩ – ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺖ /ﻗﻴﺪ +
Very
123
www.ParsBook.org
ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰvery ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ: too & very ﻓﺮﻕ
:ﻼ
ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰmany ﻭmuch ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯtoo, very
:ﻼ
. ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩvery , too ﺑﺮﻋﻜﺲ، ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻛﺎﻓﻲenough ﻛﻠﻤﻪ
ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰenough ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ
:ﻼ
124
www.ParsBook.org
: few & littleﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻤﻴﺘﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻧﻘﺪﺭ ﻧﺎﭼﻴﺰﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﺘﺮﻧﺪ.
ﺍﮔﺮ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺸﻤﮕﻴﺮﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ fewﻭ littleﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﻢ ﻗﺒـﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺣـﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳـﻒ )(a
ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ.
ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﺓ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ.
all
plenty of – a great deal of – a lot of a lot of – a large number of – plenty of
most most
much many
------- several
little few
no
125
www.ParsBook.org
ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﺎﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ
ﻼ:
ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ .ﻣﺜ ﹰ
126
www.ParsBook.org
Such
ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑـﻞ ﺷـﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻣﻔـﺮﺩ ﺑـﺪﻳﻦ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ:
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ Such a/anﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ:
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ Suchﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺻﻔﺘﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ:
ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺭﺍ Veryﺷﺪﺕ ﺑﺨﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺟـﺎﻱ ﺣـﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳـﻒ ﺑـﺪﻳﻦ
ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ.
127
www.ParsBook.org
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ :
2ـ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻡ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ،ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺳﺎﻟﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ.
4ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﻟﻐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻨﺪ.
6ـ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻫﺪﻳﺔ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﺭﺯﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺪﺭ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺪ.
128
www.ParsBook.org
enough وtoo ﺑﺎ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ
. ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪenough ﻳﺎtoo ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ
. ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ:1
. ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ ﭼﻴﺰ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ:2
129
www.ParsBook.org
»«Other »ﺩﻳﮕﺮ«
ﻛﻠﻤﺔ otherﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ
ﻼ:
ﻼ:
ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﻴﻦ Other+ Ö the other + ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ
another one
other ones the other one
the other ones
ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ anotherﻭ ) the otherﻣﻔﺮﺩ( ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ
ﻛﺮﺩ.
130
www.ParsBook.org
ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ otherﻭ ) the otherﺟﻤﻊ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑـﻪ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ
ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻑ ) (Sﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ.
ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ otherﻭ anotherﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ.
ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
ﻼ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺣﻤﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻢ ﻭ ﺍﺣﻤﺪ ﻣﺮﺍ ﻣـﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳـﺪ ﺑﻬﺘـﺮ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﮔﻔﺘـﻪ ﺷـﻮﺩ :ﺍﺣﻤـﺪ ﻭ ﻣـﻦ
ﻣﺜ ﹰ
ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻴﻢ.
ﻣﻌﻨﻲ )ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ـ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﻞ to gatherﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺟﻤـﻊ ﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺷـﺘﺒﺎﻩ
ﻛﺮﺩ.
131
www.ParsBook.org
other than = except ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ
4ـ ﺳﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ـ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻢ.
5ـ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺼﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺣﻴﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ،ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺳﻬﺎﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ
6ـ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻠﻮﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻟﻄﻔﹰﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ.
7ـ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ.
8ـ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ.
132
www.ParsBook.org
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ :
1ـ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺍﻻﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ.
7ـ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺑﭽﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻤﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮔﻔﺘﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺁﻣﺪ.
9ـ ﻣﻬﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺟﺸﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺰﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﺸﻜﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ.
10ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺣﻴﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺷﺎﮔﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻤﻴﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ.
13ـ ﺗﻮﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻴﺒﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﺮﻱ.
14ـ ﭘﺴﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻤﻴﺖ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﮔﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ.
133
www.ParsBook.org
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ :
He had picked the most beautiful flower from this garden.
3ـ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺮﺵ ﺑﺎﻫﻮﺵ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ.
He is supposed to take the most expensive present for his father.
Our house is more expensive than the house that you have bought.
7ـ ﺍﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ.
I could drive the longest road in this country for 24 hours.
9ـ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻛﻔﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻮ ﺍﺭﺯﺍﻧﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
134
www.ParsBook.org
I think, your shoes are cheaper than mine
.ـ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻳﺒﺎﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻫﺪﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻡ10
135
www.ParsBook.org
ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ Relative Pronouns ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ
ﻼ ﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ،ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻠﻬـﺎﻱ
ﻗﺒ ﹰ
Linkﻳﺎ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ .ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ،ﺷﻜﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﭼﻨﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﻭﺻـﻔﻲ
ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﭘﺲ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ؛ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .ﺧﺎﺻـﻴﺖ
ﺩﻳﮕﺮ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣـﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ.
ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ ﺑﻬﺮ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻫﻤﺔ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ »ﻛﻪ« ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ )ﻙ ـ ﻩ( ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴـﻲ
ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﺸﺎﻥ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺡ.
1ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ whoﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
136
www.ParsBook.org
6ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ whenﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
of whichﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛـﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ whoseﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺠـﺎﻱ whoseﺍﺯ
ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ whoseﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ whoseﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ whoseﺍﺯ of whichﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ
ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ.
9ـ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ whichﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ The thingﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺠـﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴـﺐ The thing whichﺍﺯ
137
www.ParsBook.org
ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺳﻢ ،ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻـﻮﻟﻲ ) ،(whoﻫﻤـﺔ ﺿـﻤﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻜـﺎﺭ ﻣـﻲ
ﻼ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ:
ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﻣﺜ ﹰ
138
www.ParsBook.org
ﺷﻨﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ Personﺑﻔﻬﻤﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻫﺮ ﺟﻤﻠـﺔ ﻭﺻـﻔﻲ
ﻼ:
ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ
ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﺻﺪﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣـﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﺑﻜـﺎﺭ
ﻼ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ:
ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ
ﻼ:
) (unnecessaryﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ .ﻣﺜ ﹰ
ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﻧﻜﺘﺔ ﻣﻬﻢ :ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺟـﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ ﻭ ﺣـﺬﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻫـﺎﻱ none definingﺑﻜـﺎﺭ ﻧﻤـﻲ ﺭﻭﻧـﺪ ﻭﻟـﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻫـﺎﻱ
definingﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ.
1ـ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ.
139
www.ParsBook.org
2ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻭﺩ ﺑﻴﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ.
3ـ ﻣﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺟﻴﺐ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻡ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺩ ﻓﻘﻴﺮ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻛﻨﻢ.
6ـ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﺑﻮﺩ.
10ـ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺨﺮﺩ ﮔﺮﺍﻧﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ.
140
www.ParsBook.org
ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺣﺪﺳﻲ ﻭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ
ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺑﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟـﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳـﺮ ﻧﺸـﺎﻥ
must ـ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ
ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ) (can, may, shall, will, mustﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻣﺪﺍﻝ ﮔﻮﻳﻨـﺪ
).(modal
ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ .ﻛﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ:
would-should-might-couldﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﻝ ﻭﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺎ ﺳـﻪ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﻣﺼـﺪﺭ ﺳـﺎﺩﻩ ،
141
www.ParsBook.org
1ـ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ :ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﻝ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﺻـﻠﻪ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ ﺣـﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻳـﺎ
ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ Shouldﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ـ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﻣﺜ ﹰ
ﻼ:
ﺣﺎﻝ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻇـﺎﻫﺮ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ
ﻼ:
ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ
ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ mayﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺣﺪﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺯﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
3ـ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ :ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ can , must , mayﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﺣﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ
ﻼ:
ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪHellen must have seen the film. .
ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﺣﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺮﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺣﺪﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺯﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷـﺘﻪ ﺭﺥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ
ﻼ ﺍﺯﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺣﺪﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺯﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
ﻣﺜ ﹰ
142
www.ParsBook.org
ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻗﺘـﻲ might-ought to-should-could-wouldﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﻴـﺐ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠـﺔ ﺣﺎﺻـﻠﻪ ﮔﺬﺷـﺘﺔ
ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ.
could
should
)ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ( would + have P.P
might
ought to
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:
I should have gone there. ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻲﺭﻓﺘﻢ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ )ﻛﻪ ﻧﺮﻓﺘﻢ(.
ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ notﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑـﺎﻻ
ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ notﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ:
I shouldn’t have gone there. ﻣﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻲﺭﻓﺘﻢ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ )ﻭﻟﻲ ﺭﻓﺘﻢ(.
3ـ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﻳﻢ ﺟﺎ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻢ .ﭼﻮﻥ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺟﻴﺒﻢ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ.
143
www.ParsBook.org
4ـ ﺗﻮ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺗﻮﻫﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻱ.
5ـ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻓﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺩﻛﺘﺮ )ﭼﻮﻥ ﭼﺸﻤﻬﺎﻳﺶ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ(.
6ـ ﺗﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﻧﺴﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺷﻮﻱ ﻧﻤﻴﺪﻭﻧﻢ ﭼﺮﺍ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻱ.
8ـ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﺯﻭﺩﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ.
144
www.ParsBook.org
ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ
ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ.
ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ :ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣـﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺘـﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ
ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ.
1ـ ﺗﺎ +ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ← ) (By tomorrowﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ By +
in
two weeks 2ـ ﺗﺎ +ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ←
within
when
145
www.ParsBook.org
Conditionals ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ
ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﻜﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ ) (if clauseﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠـﻪ
ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻛﺎﻣـﺎ )ﻭ(
ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﺎ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ
ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ.
ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ .ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ـ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻫﺴـﺘﻨﺪ
ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺡ:
ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ) (Possibleﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ.
146
www.ParsBook.org
2ـ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ :ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ.
If Helen had money now, she could buy the car.
ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺍﻻﻥ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﻧﺴﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﺮﺩ.
ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﻤـﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻧـﻮﻉ
ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ) (imaginaryﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ.
if +
ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ ﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﺰﺍﺀ
have + P.P + have + P.Pﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ
If Hellen had had money, she could have bought the book yesterday.
ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﺮﺩ.
ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ،ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻧﻴﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧـﺪ
ﻼ:
ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ
147
www.ParsBook.org
ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻧﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭ ﺳـﻮﻡ ﺍﺣﺘﻴـﺎﺝ ﺑـﻪ ﺟﻤﻠـﺔ ﻧﺸـﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺑـﺪﻳﻦ
ﻼ:
ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ
She didn't try, if she had tried , she would have succeeded.
148
www.ParsBook.org
» ﻭﺍﻻ« Otherwise
ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻭﺍﻻ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ if clauseﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ .ﻣﺜ ﹰ
ﻼ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ:
They didn’t invite me, If they had invited me, I would have gone.
ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ:
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ:
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ otherwiseﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ
ﻼ:
149
www.ParsBook.org
ﻛﺎﺷﻜﻲ ـ ﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺵ » « Wish
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ wishﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ toﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ wishﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ wishﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ wishﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺁﺭﺯﻭ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻛﺎﺵ ـ ﻛﺎﺷﻜﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ
ﻭ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺁﺭﺯﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺁﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺣﺘﻤﻲ ﻭﻳﻘﻴﻨـﻲ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ wishﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﺟـﺰﺀ
1ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﺭﺯﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ wishﺑﺎ wouldﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﻣﺜ ﹰ
ﻼ:
2ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﺭﺯﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ،ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ wishﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ.
I wish They called me now. ﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺵ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺯﺩﻧﺪ.
3ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﺭﺯﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ wishﺑﺎ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ
ﻼ:
ﻳﺎﺩﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﻣﻬﻢ :ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ wishﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ
ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ.
150
www.ParsBook.org
ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝif
ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ifﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ.
on condition
Suppose
Pr ovidedﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ
Pr oviding Suppo sin g
I will sign the contract provided you give me some money.
ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ifﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ.
ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺲ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮﻱ ﺗـﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﻫـﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺎﻋـﺪﺓ ﺁﻥ
ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ،ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ toﺑﻜـﺎﺭ ﻣـﻲ
ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻭ
it’s time you finished the job. ﻭﻗﺘﺸﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻛﻨﻲ
151
www.ParsBook.org
ﺣﺬﻑIF
ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ ) (if clauseﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻣﻴﺘـﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﻠﻤـﺔ ifﺭﺍ
(1ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻭﻝ :ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ Shouldﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎ ﹰﻻ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ .ﻣﺜ ﹰ
ﻼ:
(2ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ :ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ wereﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣـﺬﻑ ifﻣﻴﺘـﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ
ﻛﺮﺩ.
(3ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻮﻡ :ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ hadﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺣـﺬﻑ ifﻣﻴﺘـﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛـﺮﺩ ﺑـﺪﻳﻦ
ﺻﻮﺭﺕ:
ﻧﻜﺘﻪ Should :ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ »ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎ ﹰﻻ« ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ifﻣـﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ
ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ.
152
www.ParsBook.org
Unless
ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ ) (if clauseﺟﺎﻱ ifﻭ notﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ.
ﻼ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺗﻮ ﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻱ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﻮﺷﺶ ﻧﻜﻨﻲ
ﻣﺜ ﹰ
ﺗﺬﮐﺮ:
If not = unless
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:
Unless you don’t try, you will succeed = Unless you try, you won't succeed.
153
www.ParsBook.org
Would rather
ﻼ ﻓﻌﻞ Preferﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻳﺎﺩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ
ﻗﺒ ﹰ
would ratherﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﻲ ﺑﺎ preferﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺡ:
(2ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺎ Preferﻭ would ratherﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ.
ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ) (2ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺘـﹰﺎ ﺑـﺎ would ratherﻣﻤﻜـﻦ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ ﺑﻠﻜـﻪ ﺑـﺎ
preferﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ.
154
www.ParsBook.org
(3ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺎ Preferﻭ would ratherﺑﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﺯﻳـﺮ ﺑﻴـﺎﻥ ﻣـﻲ
ﺷﻮﺩ.
(4ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺎ Preferﻭ would ratherﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
155
www.ParsBook.org
as if – as though
ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ »ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ـ ﮔﻮﻳﻲ« ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﻛـﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴـﺖ
ﻼ:
ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﮔﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﭙﻨﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ
ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﻨﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ as ifﻭ as thoughtﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ.
ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﭘﻨﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ as ifﻭ as thoughtﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ.
156
www.ParsBook.org
ﻧﻜﻨﻪ( » « in Case )ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺍ
ﻼ:
ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ .ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﺱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﺎﮔﻮﺍﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ .ﻣﺜ ﹰ
Helen has left the door open, in case Her mother comes earlier.
157
www.ParsBook.org
Both
ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ.
(1ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ.
ﻓﻌﻞ + bothﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ +ﺍﺳﻢ The students can both study hard.
158
www.ParsBook.org
active & passive voice : ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ
ﻛﻠﻤﻪ Voiceﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﻢ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ activeﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ
ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﺖ passiveﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ
ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﺖ activeﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :
-2ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ Subject
Suffererﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ
ﻼ:
Hellen is a student.
ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ Subjectﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ suffererﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﻠـﻮﻡ Subjectﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ
ﺍﺳﺖ .
159
www.ParsBook.org
ﻼ ﻳﺎﺩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺣـﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺻـﻔﺖ ﻓﻌـﻞ ﻧﻴـﺰ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻥ
ﻗﺒ ﹰ
present participle
Participle
Past participle
ﺻﻔﺖ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ :ﺑﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ingﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﻣﺜﻞ :
ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻫﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻧﺎﮔﺰﻳﺮ ﺳﻮﮊﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .
ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ :ﺩﺭ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ edﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :
ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﻱ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻓﻌﻠﻬـﺎﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻛـﻪ ﻣﻔﻌـﻮﻝ ﻧﻤـﻲ
ﻼ:
ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ .ﻣﺜ ﹰ
160
www.ParsBook.org
ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ goﻓﻌﻞ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻧﻤﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﻭ himﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ goﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﺨﺎﻃﺮ
ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ
ﺗﺎ ﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻴﻢ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ – ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ – ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺼـﺪﺭ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ
To be + p p
ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻓﻌﻞ to beﻭ p.pﻓﻌﻞ ﺣﻀﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ .
ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ .ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺜﻞ
:
ﺍﻟﻒ ( ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ،ﻣﺘﻌﺪﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ
ﻧﻴﺴﺖ .
ﺏ ( ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ Subject suffererﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ
She ----------.
161
www.ParsBook.org
ﺝ ( ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ byﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ
-3ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻗﺒ ﹰ
ﻼ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﺪ .
162
www.ParsBook.org
-8ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻔﺸﻬﺎ ﭘﺎﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ .
-4ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .
163
www.ParsBook.org
ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ
Helen will have told Bob Æ Bob will have been told by Helen.
: ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ-8
ﺁﻳﻨـﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣـﻞ ﺍﺳـﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﮔﺬﺷـﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣـﻞ، ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳـﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ، ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ4 ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ16 ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ
164
www.ParsBook.org
ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ
? Did Hellen study the book ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻣﺜﻞ
ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ :ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺧﺒﺮﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ
ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ
? Where did Hellen take the bookﺑـﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﺳـﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﻠـﻮﻡ ﻣﺜـﻞ :
ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺻﺮﻑ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ.
ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ whoﻭ whomﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﻲ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ :
-1ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ whomﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺨـﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﻬـﻮﻝ
ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﺑﺠﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻜﺘـﻪ ﻛـﻪ ﭼـﻮﻥ whomﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻣﻌﻠـﻮﻡ
ﻣﺜﻞ :
ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ whoﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ:
165
www.ParsBook.org
ﻭ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﺑﺠﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛـﻪ ﭼـﻮﻥ by whomﺩﺭ
ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ :
166
www.ParsBook.org
ﺟﺎﻱ ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ :
-1ﻗﻴﺪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ :ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ
ﻼ:
-2ﻗﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ :ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ .ﻣﺜ ﹰ
ﻼ:
: just -2ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ justﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ haveﻳﺎ hadﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ p.pﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻـﻠﻲ ﺑـﻪ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﻣـﻲ
ﺭﻭﺩ.
ﻼ:
ﻣﺜ ﹰ
ﻼ:
ﻣﺜ ﹰ
167
www.ParsBook.org
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ :
-10ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﺒ ﹰ
ﻼ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ.
ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﹰﺎ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ
ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﹰﺎ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺳﻄﻪ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺟﻨﺒﻪ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
.ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ.
168
www.ParsBook.org
The letter is written to him by me.
He is written the letter by me.
ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺴﻲ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻲ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺮﻫﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻓﺖ .
ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻴﺰﺩ ﺗﺎ subject sufferﺷﻮﺩ ﺑـﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌـﻞ ﺍﺻـﻠﻲ to
169
www.ParsBook.org
ﺳﺒﺒﻲ : ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﺒﺒﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺟﻪ
ﻼ
ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﺒﺒﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺳﺒﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣـﺜ ﹰ
ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ +ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ )ﺑﺮﻫﻨﻪ( +ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ + have +ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﺐ
ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ getﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﺒﺒﻲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ toﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ
ﻼ:
170
www.ParsBook.org
-4ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ ﻛﻔﺎﺵ ﺗﺨﺖ ﻛﻔﺸﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ.
-9ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺩﺍﺭ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﻓﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺑﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﺭﻭ ﻛﻨﺪ.
-10ﺗﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺪﻫﻲ ﻣﺄﻣﻮﺭ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﺮﺍﻍﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ.
171
www.ParsBook.org
reported speach ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ
ﻧﻘﻞ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺳﺨﻦ ﭘﺲ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺨﻦ ﻛﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻴـﺎﻥ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ ﺳـﺨﻦ ﻳـﺎ
ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻳﻚ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ.
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺮﻓﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﺧﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﹰﺎ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﺴـﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻧﻘـﻞ
ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
”Helen says, “what a nice car it is -4ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺗﻌﺠﺒﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ :
ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﮔﺮ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ :
172
www.ParsBook.org
ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ Indirect speech ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺨﻦ ﻳﺎ ﮔﻔﺘﺔ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺧﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺮﻑ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ .ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ
ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺍﺳﺖ:
ﺍﮔﺮ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﺒﺮﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ :
ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺣﺬﻑ commaﻭ ﻛﻮﺗﻴﺸﻦ ﻣﺎﺭﻙ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ) ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘـﻞ ﺧﺒـﺮﻱ thatﺧﻮﺍﻫـﺪ ﺑـﻮﺩ ( ﺑـﺪﻳﻦ
ﺻﻮﺭﺕ :
ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ :ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ 12ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ:
173
www.ParsBook.org
ﻣﺜ ﹰ.( ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ3
:ﻼ
: ﻣﺜﻼ.( ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ8
Bob said, “I will have been studying for two years by April.”
Bob said that he would have been studying for two years by April.
174
www.ParsBook.org
ﻳﺎﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﻱ :ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻧﮕـﻪ ﺩﺍﺷـﺖ ﻭ ﺗﺒـﺪﻳﻞ ﺑـﻪ
ﻼ:
ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻜﺮﺩ .ﻣﺜ ﹰ
ﻧﻜﺘﻪ :ﺩﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ ﻭ ﺑـﻪ ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ
ﻼ:
ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ .ﻣﺜ ﹰ
ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻓﻌﻞ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﮕﺮ ) ( reporting tagﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ
ﺍﻣّﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﺒﺮﻱ say toﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻠﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ tellﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﻣﺜﻼ:
175
www.ParsBook.org
» ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ «
ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ:
ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ .
-3ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺼﻞﻫﺎ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻨﺞ ﺷﻨﺒﻪ ﺩﺭﺱ 2ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪ.
-8ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺸﻲ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ 5ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ .
176
www.ParsBook.org
ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ:
ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ.
ﻼ:
ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ) ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ( ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ifﻭ whetherﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺧﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ :
ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ
ﻼ:
ﻣﺜ ﹰ
”Helen said to Bob, “open the door before you come in.
ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﺎ toﺭﺑﻂ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺮﻭ ﻣﺸﻤﻮﻝ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ
177
www.ParsBook.org
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ :
-1ﻣﻦ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻢ ﺑﺎﺯﺩﻳﺪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻡ.
ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ.
-3ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﺑﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺩﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻧﺪ ﭼﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﭘﺎ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ.
ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ
178
www.ParsBook.org
The following + ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ
next + → ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ The next + ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ
The + ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ+ after
179
www.ParsBook.org
ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﻌﺠﺒﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ :
ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺗﻌﺠﺒﻲ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ
ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ .ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺗﻌﺠﺒﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﺠﺐ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ:
ﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﺠﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ :
180
www.ParsBook.org
ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ) ( gerund ﺍﺳﻢ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺸﺘﻖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧـﺮ ﻫـﺮ
-1ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ . toﺩﻟﻴـﻞ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻴـﺰ
ﻼ:
ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ
-3ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ:
181
www.ParsBook.org
deny ﺍﻧﻜﺎﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ forgive ﻋﻔﻮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ
forbid ﻗﺪﻏﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ include ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺪﻥ
imagine ﺗﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ keep ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ
mention ﻳﺎﺩﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ oppose ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻔﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ
mind ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ quit ﺗﺮﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ
postpone ﻟﻐﻮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ risk ﺑﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ
practice ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ remember ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺳﭙﺮﺩﻥ
resume ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ stop ﺩﺳﺖ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻥ
suggest ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ tolerate ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ
understand ﻓﻬﻤﻴﺪﻥ
ﻼ:
ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﻣﻬﻢ :ﭼﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺟﻨﺒﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﭘﺲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺘﻲ ) (′sﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ
ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ :
-5ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﻧﺠﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻃﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ.
182
www.ParsBook.org
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ :
ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ.
-5ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺴﺮﺵ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﺎﺱ ﻛﺒﺎﺏ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ.
ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ :ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﻳـﻚ ﺻـﻔﺖ
183
www.ParsBook.org
ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ :to
ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ preferﻭ startﻭ planﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ to
ﺻﻮﺭﺕ:
ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ stopﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ stopﺩﺳﺖ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻲ
ﻼ:
ﻛﺸﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺸﻴﺪ .ﻣﺜ ﹰ
ﺏ( ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ rememberﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ rememberﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ
rememberﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻳﻦ rememberﻣﺘﺮﺍﺩﻑ ﺑﺎ ) ( not forgetﺍﺳﺖ
ﻼ:
ﻣﺜ ﹰ
184
www.ParsBook.org
ﺑﺤﺚ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ :
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ
ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑـﻪ ﺻـﻔﺖ ﻓـﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻛﺎﻣـﻞ ﻣـﻲ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ (Present .
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:
ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ
185
www.ParsBook.org
ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ
ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ :ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ :ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ-ﺩﺍﺭﻱ -ﺩﺍﺭﺩ-ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ-ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ-ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ
»ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ« ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ be +ing
ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ be :ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ are,is,amﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻭ ingﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ
now ﺣﺎﻻ
This morning
30
www.ParsBook.org
This year
This week
-2ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ yﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ingﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ yﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ingﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﭼﺴﺒﺪ.
PlayÆplaying
StudyÆstudying
CarryÆcarrying
-3ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ eﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ingﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ eﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ingﻣﻲ ﻧﺸﻴﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﻓﻌﻞ
Come Æcoming
Take Ætaking
Have Æhaving
31
www.ParsBook.org
Be Æbeing
-4ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﻲ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﻲ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺣﺮﻑ
ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ) (a,e,i,o,uﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ingﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ingﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
SitÆ sitting
Put Æ putting
Read Æ reading
-5ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ieﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ingﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ieﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ yﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ingﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
32
www.ParsBook.org
ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ
ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ :ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ edﻳﺎ iedﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ.
ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ :
do Æ did
am , is Æ was
are Æ were
have Æ had
go Æ went
come Æ came
see Æ saw
ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻬﻢ :ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ didﻳﺎ didn’tﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ edﻳﺎ iedﺣﺬﻑ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻝ
ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ.
33
www.ParsBook.org
-1ﻭﺟﻮﺩ edﻳﺎ iedﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ.
Æﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ in + ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ )( in 1920
ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ :ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺗﺬﻛﺮ :ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ yﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ yﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺻﺪﺍﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ed
ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ.
play Æ played
stay Æ stayed
∗say Æ said
∗pay Æ paid
ﻭ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ yﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ yﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺻﺪﺍﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ yﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻣﻲ
ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ iﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺳﭙﺲ edﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ iedﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
carry Æ carried
study Æ studied
try Æ tried
34
www.ParsBook.org
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ :
ﭘﺎﺳﺦ:
35
www.ParsBook.org
:ﺯﻧﮓ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﺢ
To Do
You did. Did you do?
ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ
He has to go.
He had to teach.
36
www.ParsBook.org
I was teacher last year.
My brother was playing the piano when his teacher rang.
ﺗﺬﻛﺮ :ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ whenﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ
ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ.
37
www.ParsBook.org
ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ :
ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﺋﻴﻢ ) (toﻱ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﺋﻴﻢ youﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻲ
ﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ:
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ youﺑﻮﺩ youﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ .
-ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ to beﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ youﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ aren’tﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ don’t be
ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻳﻚ againﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ .
38
www.ParsBook.org
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ :
ﭘﺎﺳﺦ:
39
www.ParsBook.org
6-Please be happy.
:ﻣﺮﻭﺭ
40
www.ParsBook.org
They will be here in three weeks.
41
www.ParsBook.org
ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺩﻩSimple future tense :
ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ +ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ + will / shall +ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ :
ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ) (willﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ shallﻫﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ .
tomorrow ﻓﺮﺩﺍ
( a week/ a year/ a monthﺯﻣﺎﻥ in+ )ﺗﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ،ﻳﮏ ﺳﺎﻝ ،ﻳﮏ ﻣﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ
ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ :ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ willﻳﺎ shallﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ notﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ
ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻬﻢ :ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ willﻳﺎ shallﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ.
42
www.ParsBook.org
whenÆ ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ as long as Æ ﻣﺎﺩﺍﻣﻴﻜﻪ
till Æ ﺗﺎ
until Æ ﺗﺎ
43
www.ParsBook.org
ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ
ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ )ﻛﻪ ( ﺭﺑﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ
ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ) :(2ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ
ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ) : (3ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﺶ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻫﻢ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ
ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ thatﻭ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ not toﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻳﻢ.
Not to come
44
www.ParsBook.org
not to write
ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ) :(4ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ thatﻭ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ toﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ
I let you that you go. Æ I let you to go Æ I let you go.
I make you that you be. Æ I make you to be Æ I make you be.
see ﺩﻳﺪﻥ
hear ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ
have ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ
know ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻦ
ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ) :(5ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺣﺴﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ thatﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﻢ
45
www.ParsBook.org
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ :
46
www.ParsBook.org
tell & say ﺩﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ
ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻧﻴﺎﻳﺪ ) ﮔﻔﺘﻦ( ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ sayﻭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺁﻥ
saidﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻑ ) ﺑﻪ ( ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ) ﮔﻔﺘﻦ ( ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ
ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ )ﺭﺍ( ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﮔﻔﺘﻦ( ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ meanﻭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺁﻥ meantﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻬﻢ :ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ tellاز ﻛﻠﻤﻪ say toﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺣﺘﻤﹰﺎ tellﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ
ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ.
47
www.ParsBook.org
ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ
every dayﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ -1ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ :ﺟﺎﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜﻞ :
-2ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ
ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ.
48
www.ParsBook.org
-3ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ
ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ .
-4ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺎﹰﻛﻴﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ.
) ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ 2ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ )(.ﻓﻌﻞ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﺎﮐﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ doﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(.
49
www.ParsBook.org
ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ
ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﻢ .
ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻋﻼﺋﻤﻲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ،
Theﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻭ )ﺭﺍ -ﻛﻪ – ﻛﺴﺮﻩ( ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ:
-1ﺍﮔﺮ uﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ) ﻳﻮ( ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ) (aﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ) (uﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ )ﺁ( ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ
50
www.ParsBook.org
a used car ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﻬﻨﻪ
-3ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ) (hﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ) (aﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ) (hﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ anﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ.
ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ) :(1ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ theﺑﺎ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﻮﻫﻬﺎ – ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻫﺎ -ﺭﻭﺩﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ -ﺟﻨﮕﻠﻬﺎ -ﺧﻠﻴﺠﻬﺎ –ﺻﺤﺮﺍﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ .
ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ) :(2ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻧﻴﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ theﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ .
The god, The sun, The earth, The moon, The sky
ﺑﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ Theﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ : •
51
www.ParsBook.org
The east ﺷﺮﻕ
ﺑﺎ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺬﻫﺒﻲ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ Theﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ . •
ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ :ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ made ofﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ.
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﺷﻬﺮ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﻫﺎ Theﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ. •
ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻳﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺣﺘﻤﹰﺎ Theﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ . •
52
www.ParsBook.org
ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ
ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮﻱ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲ ﻧﺸﻴﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ :
ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺟﻤﻊ
53
www.ParsBook.org
ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﺖ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ :
ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﺴﺮﻩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻭﻡ
ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻛﺴﺮﻩ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ )(of
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﭼﭗ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻛﺴﺮﻩ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ •
ﺑﻪ )(′s
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﺎ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ sﻳﺎ esﻳﺎ iesﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ) (′sﻓﻘﻂ ) (,ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ ﻭ )(s •
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ) (′sﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ . •
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ) (′sﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ. •
54
www.ParsBook.org
ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ »ﺍﺯ« ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ
55
www.ParsBook.org
: through -4ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻂ ﻭ ﺑﻴﻦ .
: than -5ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻱ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ erﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ
: how -7ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺠﺎ -ﭼﻄﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻣﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ .
56
www.ParsBook.org
How do you know my address?
57
www.ParsBook.org
Future Continuous Tense « » ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ
ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦwill ﻭﻳﺎshall ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ
I shall be working
I will be working
He/she/it will be working
You will be working
We shall be working
We will be working
They will be working
. ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪwill ﻭshall ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ: ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ
: ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ-ﺍﻟﻒ
: ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻣﺜﻞ-ﺏ
58
www.ParsBook.org
We will be having a test next week .ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ
59
www.ParsBook.org
: ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ
. ﻣﺎ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻩ ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺭﺿﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻧﻮ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ-4
60
www.ParsBook.org
Sequence of tenses ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎ:
ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣـﻲ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:
He knew well that he didn’t have the right to fire me.
61
www.ParsBook.org
» «Used to
ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ
) ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ -ﻗﺪﻳﻤﻬﺎ – ﺍﻭﻧﺮﻭﺯﻫﺎ -ﺟﻮﺍﻧﻴﻬﺎ( ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ didﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:
?Did you use to study here ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﻮ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻱ.
I didn’t use to see him very often. ﻣﻦ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺩﻳﺪﻡ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:
He used to be the dean of high school but he isn’t now ,again.
ﺗﻮﺟﻪ :ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ used toﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ wouldﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
62
www.ParsBook.org
someone else : ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ
:ﻣﺜﺎﻝ
ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒ ﹰ-4
.ﻼ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﺑﻴﺪﻡ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻻﻥ ﺯﻭﺩ ﺑﻴﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻡ
:ﺗﺬﮐﺮ
63
www.ParsBook.org
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:
ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎﻫﺎ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻧﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻢ ﻛﻢ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ.
Some of you aren’t used to standing in front of the class but don’t worry, gradually
you will get used to it.
64
www.ParsBook.org
. ﺍﻭﻟﺶ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻴﻢ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ-4
. ﺍﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻬﺎﺭ ﻳﻚ ﭼﺮﺕ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ-5
. ﻧﻪ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻡ – ﻧﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﺒﺎﺵ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻲ، ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ-6
. ﺍﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺑﺨﻮﻧﻪ-7
65
www.ParsBook.org
« Question tag » ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ
ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻦ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻨﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ) ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ -ﻣﮕﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻃـﻮﺭ
ﻧﻴﺴﺖ -ﻭ ﻫﺎﻥ(ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ:
-1ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻭ notﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ
-2ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ
ﻼ
ﺑﺒﺮﻳﻢ ﻣﺜ ﹰ
ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ : 1ﭼﻮﻥ am notﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﺯ aren’t Iﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ am I notﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ
ﻣﺜﻞ :
66
www.ParsBook.org
ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻭﻓﺎﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ؟
ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ : 3ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:
67
www.ParsBook.org
Money goes nowhere nowadays, does it?
shall we ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ) ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ( ﺿـﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﺳـﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺷـﺎﻥlet’s ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ: 4 ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ
: ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﭼﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩtag : 5 ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ
68
www.ParsBook.org
Avoid Repatition ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ
ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ aﻭ anﺭﺍ
ﺑﻪ oneﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ Any & some .ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑـﺎ noﻣﻨﻔـﻲ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺩﺭ
ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ .ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ) ﻫـﻢ ( ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻣـﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﺯ noneﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ
)(4
none, either
We have none, either.
69
www.ParsBook.org
to know of: ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ
party : ﻣﻬﻤﺎﻧﻲ
70
www.ParsBook.org
The additions » ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ «
ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ » ﻫﻢ _ ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ « ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:
He used to study here, so did his brother/ his brother did too.
He doesn’t have to work with you, neither do the workers/ the workers don’t either.
He won’t attend the class tomorrow, his friend won’t either/ neither will his friend.
71
www.ParsBook.org
. ﺍﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻼﻡ ﻧﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﺍﺷﺶ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ-6
72
www.ParsBook.org
CAN Æ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ
ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗـﺪﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻦ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ canﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ
-1ﺗﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺪﺭﺕ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻱ.
You can come with me tomorrow, provided you ask your father’s permission.
-2ﭘﺎﻳﻢ ﺑﺪ ﺟﻮﺭﻱ ﺩﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﻧﻢ ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺗﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻛﻨﻢ.
My foot hurts painfully, I won’t be able to play on the team tomorrow.
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻨﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻄـﺮﺡ ﮔـﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺍﺯ
ﺧﻮﺩ mustﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ .ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻭ ﺩﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﯼ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ
must Æ Will have toﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ )ﻋﻠﺖ ﻭ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﯼ(
73
www.ParsBook.org
-1ﺗﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻲ ﻭﮔﺮﻧﻪ ) ﻭﺍﻻ ( ﺍﺧﺮﺍﺟﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ.
-2ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻜﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺷﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻲ.
If you want to pass in the university enterance examination , you will have to study
hard.
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ will wantﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ
ﻛﻨﻴﻢ.
ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻗﺼﺪ ﻭ ﺗﺼـﻤﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺍﺯ to be going toﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣـﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩﻭ ﺩﺭ
ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
expect Æ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ،ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺶ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ +ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ Want +
want
intend Æ ﻓﻌﻞ to be going to + ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ،ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ
ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ
need Æ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺷﺨﺺ will want + ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ،ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:
ﻣﻦ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﭘﻮﻟﻢ ﺭﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻡ – ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺨﺮﻡ – ﺍﺯﺕ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻡ ﭘﻮﻟﻢ ﺭﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺑﺪﻫﻲ.
74
www.ParsBook.org
I will want my money next week - I’m going to buy a car- I want you to pay my
money back.
75
www.ParsBook.org
Some &any
some -1ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ) ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ – ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﺎﻳﻲ – ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺟﻤـﻊ ﻭ ﺑـﻪ ﻣﻔﻬـﻮﻡ ) ﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭﻱ –
ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻤﻲ – ﻗﺪﺭﻱ ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﻨﻔـﻲ ﺑـﻪ anyﺗﺒـﺪﻳﻞ ﻣـﻲ ﮔـﺮﺩﺩ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:
I want to buy some books. ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺑﺨﺮﻡ.
some people say that he is crazy. ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﮔﻔﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ.
There is some cold water in the jar. ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺁﺏ ﺧﻨﻚ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻮﺯﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ.
?why didn’t you eat any fruit ﭼﺮﺍ ﺗﻮ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻣﻴﻮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻧﺨﻮﺭﺩﻱ؟
ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ : 1ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ someﺍﺳﺖ.
?would you like some more tea ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﭼﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ؟
ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ : 3ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ someﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ.
You should have a good command of english because some day , some student may
ask you some question that you can’t answer.
ﺗﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﺴﻠﻂ ﺑﺎﺷﻲ – ﭼﻮﻥ ﻳﻜﺮﻭﺯﻱ ) ﻧﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ( – ﻳﻚ ﺷﺎﮔﺮﺩﻱ ) ﻧﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ( ﻣﻤﻜـﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻳـﻚ
ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ any : 4ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
76
www.ParsBook.org
.ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻬﺎﺭ ﭼﻲ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ؟ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻲ
What would you like for lunch? Any thing you like.
77
www.ParsBook.org
» ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ «
ﺍﮔﺮ noﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ someﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ.
ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ.
78
www.ParsBook.org
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ’sﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ elseﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ
Some body
every body ﺍﺳﻢ + ’s +
any body
ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ someﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ noﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻧﺪ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨـﺪ
79
www.ParsBook.org
Some body else’s brother said some thing else.
.ﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ -5
some thing else ﻳﻚ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮÆ some other things ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ
some where else ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﻪÆ some other places ﺟﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ
some place else ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﻪÆ some other places ﺟﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ
. ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖwhat ﺍﺯsome ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ
80
www.ParsBook.org
what other things? ﭼﻪ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺍﻱ؟
:ﺍﮔﺮ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ
some body else / some one else Æ who else? ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﻛﻲ
some where else/ some place else Æ where else? ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﻛﺠﺎ
: ﻣﺜﺎﻝ. ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩwho else’s ﺍﺯwhose else ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱwho else ﺍﺯwhom else ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ: ﻧﻜﺘﻪ
81
www.ParsBook.org
» ﺩﻭ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺘﻲ ﻫﺎ «
ﭼﻮﻥ thisﻭ thatﻭ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ theseﻭ thoseﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ
82
www.ParsBook.org
Some of your classmates decide to come here next Friday.
. ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺗﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻭﻥ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺧﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺑﺸﻪ-8
This elder brother of yours can make friends with that good student or friend of mine.
83
www.ParsBook.org
possesive forms ﻣﻠﻜﻲ: ﺣﺎﻻﺕ
-1ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ
-2ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ
of -3ﻭ ′s
: own -4ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ـ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺻﺎﺣﺐ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺻﺮﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ.
His father owns a factory. ﭘﺪﺭﺵ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ -ﻛﺎﺭﺧﻮﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺗﺬﮐﺮ :ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ownﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ.
?whose car is it ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﻴﻪ؟ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﻣﻪ that is my own car.
?Whom does this fountain pen belong to ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻴﺴﺖ؟
84
www.ParsBook.org
Putting two sentences together ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ :
ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ keepﺭﺑﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ )ﻛﻪ( ﺑـﻪ )ﻛـﻪ ﺁﻳـﺎ(
» ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ،ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ« .
ﺩﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻧـﺮﺍ
ﺑﻪ ) ( or notﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ whetherﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ ) ( or notﻣـﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧـﺪ
85
www.ParsBook.org
» ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ «
ﺍﻟﻒ ( ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﭙﺮﺳﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭ ﺷﻮﻳﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ
ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ) ﮔﻔﺘﻲ -ﮔﻔﺘﻴﺪ – ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩﻳﺪ -ﺑﺒﺨﺸﻴﺪ ( ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ did
you sayﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻣﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ .ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ did you sayﺗـﺄﺛﻴﺮﻱ ﺑـﺮ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:
?Where did you say, you are going ﮔﻔﺘﻲ ﻛﺠﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ؟
? How much money do you have on you ﭼﻘﺪﺭ ﭘﻮﻝ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻫﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ ؟
?How much money did you say you have on you ﮔﻔﺘﻲ ﭼﻘﺪﺭ ﭘﻮﻝ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻫﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ؟
ﺏ( ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﭙﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺷﻨﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ،ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ
ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ » ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﻔﺘﻲ « ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ » « do you thinkﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :
86
www.ParsBook.org
» « self ﺑﺤﺚ :
-1ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﺯ ،ﺧﻮﺩﺕ ،ﺧﻮﺩﻡ ،ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ،ﺧﻮﺩﻣﺎﻥ ،ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ،ﺧﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ
،ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ » ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﻲ « ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ.
ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺟﻤﻊ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :
-2ﺍﮔﺮ selfﻫﺎ ،ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ ،ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ.
87
www.ParsBook.org
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :
ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ.
ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ toﻭ forﺻﺎﺩﻕ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ.
88
www.ParsBook.org
Here & There
hereﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻭ thereﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺗـﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ
ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ.
Here
There
Here
There
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:
89
www.ParsBook.org
» ﭼﻨﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺗﻌﺎﺭﻓﻲ «
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻴـﺎﻥ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﻣﻔـﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ there isﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﺟﻤـﻊ ﺍﺯ there are
90
www.ParsBook.org
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ :
-1ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺑﺪﻭﻧﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻮﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﺮﻱ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﻨﻲ؟
1- I want to know whether you are going to buy or rent the house.
2- Ask him if he can lend you some money.
3- I’m not sure whether he will come to the meetting with me or not.
4- He lives in this small home by him self.
5- I wish I could see my self as others see me.
91
www.ParsBook.org
» « it ﺑﺤﺚ
ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ itﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺎﺋﺐ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻣـﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻛـﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :
What time is it ? it is five to two. . ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ? ﺳﺎﻋﺖ 5ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ 2
-3ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺖ :
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :
92
www.ParsBook.org
: ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﻳﺖ-4
: ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ-5
It is easy.
It is easy to speak English.
It is easy for you to speak English.
It pays well/ it is worth it: ﻣﻲ ﺍﺭﺯﺩ – ﺍﺭﺯﺷﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ Be it so : ﺁﻣﻴﻦ – ﺍﻳﻨﻄﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻪ
93
www.ParsBook.org
ﺻﺮﻑ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﺭ 16ﺯﻣﺎﻥ
4. I have been taking . ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﻧﻘﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ) ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ (
94
www.ParsBook.org
» ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ «
-3ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﺕ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ byﺑﻪ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﻣـﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻـﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ
ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ inﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺗﻮﺑﻮﺱ onﻫﻢ
ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺩﻭ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ onﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺑﺮﻳﻢ.
95
www.ParsBook.org
inside : outside # inside -4ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻭ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻀـﺎﺩ ﺁﻥ out sideﻣـﻲ
ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
inﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ) ﺩﺭ ،ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ،ﺗﻮﻱ ( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻫـﻢ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺍﺳـﻢ
ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ intoﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ .ﻣﺘﻀﺎﺩ out # inﻭ ﻣﺘﻀﺎﺩ out of # into
ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :
ﺑﺎ ﻟﺒﺎﺱ ﭘﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮ ﻭ ﺑﭽﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻏﺮﻕ ﻣﻲ ﺷﺪ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ.
He jumped into the pool with his clothes on and pulled the drowning boy out of the
pool.
96
www.ParsBook.org
in the room , in the office ﺳﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪﻩ
97
www.ParsBook.org
: at -6ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ) ﻛﻨﺎﺭ – ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ – ﺩﻡ ( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ table , deskﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:
98
www.ParsBook.org
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺠﺎ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺧﻂ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺧﻂ؟: 1ﻣﺜﺎﻝ
99
www.ParsBook.org
ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ) ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﻧﻘﻠﻲ ( :
ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ :ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﻪ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣـﻲ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ
: Aﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ » ﺍﺳﺖ « ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳـﻲ ﻣـﻲﺑﺎﺷـﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ
ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ For ،ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺗﺮﺟﻤـﻪ ﻧﻤـﯽ
ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺣﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ
Õ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ +ﺍﺳﺖ +ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:
I have known him for two years. ﺩﻭ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻢ.
He has had this car for five years. 5ﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ.
: Bﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ » ﺍﺯ « ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ »ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ « ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﻼﻣـﺖ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﺍﻳـﻦ
ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﺸـﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻤـﻪ ) ﺍﺯ ( ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ sinceﺗﺮﺟﻤـﻪ
ﺍﺯ +ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ +ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ +ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ Õﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ
100
www.ParsBook.org
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :ﺍﺯ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﻣﺪﺭﺳﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ.
:
Cﻭﺟﻮﺩ ) ﺍﻡ ـ ﺍﻱ ـ ﺍﺳﺖ ـ ﺍﻳﻢ ـ ﺍﻳﺪ ـﺎﻧﺪ ( ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:
:for -1
101
www.ParsBook.org
since + last + ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ
He left for England two weeks ago and I haven’t heard from him since/ since then/
ever since.
.4
.( ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩII) ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺑﻪsince ( ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯI) ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ
102
www.ParsBook.org
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ :
: recently- lately .5ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﺧﻴﺮﹰﺍ – ﺗﺎﺯﮔﻲ ﻫﺎ – ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ p.pﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:
ﻼ -ﺍﺑﺪﹰﺍ -ﺗﺎ ﻛﻨﻮﻥ -ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ p.pﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧـﺪ ﺑـﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺗﻔـﺎﻭﺕ ﻛـﻪ
: ever-never .6ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ -ﺍﺻ ﹰ
everﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﻣﺎ neverﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
103
www.ParsBook.org
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﺴﺘﺎﻥ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ؟ ﻧﻪ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻧﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻡ.
.7ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺎﺿـﻲ
So far
by now
up to now
up till now
up to the present time.
: already .8ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ p.pﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒـﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﻈـﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﺳـﺖ ﻣـﺎ
: just .9ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﻥ – ﭼﻨﺪ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ -ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﻪ -ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ p.pﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :
104
www.ParsBook.org
: yet .10ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ » ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ « ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺁﻧﻜـﻪ ﻓﻌـﻞ ﻛﻤﻜـﻲ ﻭ
notﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ notﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :
: still .12ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ – ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﻫﻢ -ﺑﺎﺯ -ﻫﻢ -ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻـﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺑﻌـﺪ
ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ.
ﻧﻜﺘﻪ :ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ stillﺑﻪ anymore/ any longerﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:
105
www.ParsBook.org
» ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ « ) ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ (
ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ :ﻫﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ.
: Aﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ » ﺑﻮﺩ « ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳـﻲ ﻣـﻲ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ
ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ» ﺑﻮﺩ « ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ forﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﻤـﻲ
ﮔﺮﺩﺩ.
:A
ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ » +ﺑﻮﺩ « +ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ Åﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ
He hadn’t eaten anything for three days when we took him to the doctor.
: Bﻭﺟﻮﺩ ) ﺑﻮﺩﻡ – ﺑﻮﺩﻱ – ﺑﻮﺩ – ﺑﻮﺩﻳﻢ – ﺑﻮﺩﻳﺪ – ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ ( ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ،ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ
ﺍﺳﺖ.
106
www.ParsBook.org
ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ :ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
I had gone when/ before you came in ﻣﻦ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻡ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺁﻣﺪﻱ ﺗﻮ.
I come in after you had gone. ﻣﻦ ﺁﻣﺪﻡ ﺗﻮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻱ .
ﺍﺯ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻡ ﺗﻮ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻱYou had gone since I had arrived. .
107
www.ParsBook.org